24D-212 2015.01.16 NHA State Street Project Manual (Edited for Permitting)State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1of4
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Access to site.
4. Coordination with occupants.
5. Work restrictions.
6. Specification and drawing conventions.
7. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and
procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: State Street (167-1/705-3) Water Mitigation and Improvements
Project Location: 256 State Street, Northhampton MA 01060 ()>Owner: Northampton
Housing Authority, 49 Old South Street, Northampton, MA 01060, Tel: 413.584.4030
.
1. Owner's Representative: David Gour, Tel: 413-584-4030.
B. Architect: Dietz & Company Architects, Inc., Marco Crescentini, Tel: 413-733-6798,
Email: marcoc@dietzarch.com.
C. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals
who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1. Mechanical/Electrical: Mark Felgate, Lindgren & Sharples, Tel: 413-732-4336
x15, Email: mfelgate@lindgrensharples.com.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2of4
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the
following:
1. Repairs to the apartment building unit entrance canopies (R-2 Use Group and
Type VB construction) as a result of water infiltration: replacement of entry
canopy support structure and existing wall structure with new materials and
configuration that will prevent future water infiltration, replacement existing
damaged interior and exterior wall finishes with new interior and exterior wall
finishes. Installation of roof to protect basement stairs and new sump pumps in
existing basins.
B. Type of Contract:
1.5 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations
as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of
this Section.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine construction operations to Apartment Unit A, B and F (front
and rear) entry canopies, exterior basement stairs, Basement Utility Room.
2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by
construction operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by
construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period.
Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to
minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere
with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3of4
or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Notify Owner not less than [72] <Insert number> hours in advance of activities
that will affect Owner's operations.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working
hours of <Insert time> a.m. to <Insert time> p.m., Monday through Friday, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Early Morning Hours: <Insert restrictions or references to regulations by
authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work>.
2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: <Insert Owner's restrictions>.
3. Hours for [Core Drilling] <Insert noisy activity>: <Insert Owner's restrictions>.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] not less than [two] <Insert
number> days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission
before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of
noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] not less than [two] <Insert
number> days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
2. Obtain [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission
before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet
of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances
[within the existing building] [on Project site] is not permitted.
G. Employee Identification: [Provide] [Owner will provide] identification tags for
Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification
tags at all times.
H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for [drug] [and]
[background] screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4of4
1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.
1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the
Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending
on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically
stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to
the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on
Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following
are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms
used in the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations
[published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard] [and] [scheduled on
Drawings].
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes
referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A. .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1of3
SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by
Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due
to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory
changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that
are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer
advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation
cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed
to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and
separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
substitution.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2of3
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction
cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of
purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract
Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution
request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for
applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution
to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
proposed substitution within 15days of receipt of request, or seven days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3of3
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the
approved substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of
need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when
the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION
PROCEDURES
01 26 00 - 1of2
SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and
processing Contract modifications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
Drawings and Specifications.
1. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request,
submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit
costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,
furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts
of trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available
total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary,"
and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications
to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to
Architect.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION
PROCEDURES
01 26 00 - 2of2
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate
the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 26 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1of6
SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative
procedures for handling changes to the Contract.
2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the
Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of
Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative
forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's
construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect and Owner's Project Manager at
earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for
submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2of6
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases
requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values
coordinated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line
items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification
Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of
values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate
the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to
nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with
Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal
subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for
Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the
Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If
required, include evidence of insurance.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials,
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3of6
for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part
of the Work.
7. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for
each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate
owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the
schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change
Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be
consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and
Owner's Project Manager and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered
by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703
as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for
Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of
schedule of values.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a
person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. ArchitectOwner's
Project Manager will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for
Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for
work completed at time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
before last day of construction period covered by application.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 4of6
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested
project acceleration.
F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate
between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and
consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid
invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation;
do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of
previous Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous
Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for
Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment
and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to Architect and Owner's Project Manager by a method ensuring receipt.
One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information about application.
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous
application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or
full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for
construction period covered by the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous
application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or
full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 5of6
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final
waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the
application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the
following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final)
incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of
schedule by each Contractor.
5. Products list (preliminary if not final).
6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the
Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100
percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete
and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
L. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit
final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 6of6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 1of10
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
4. Project meetings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the
Contract.
3. Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the
Work with Owner's Commissioning Authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by
or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed
for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment
fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information
in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or
supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 2of10
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of starting construction operations, submit a list
of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in
attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list
addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone
numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each
other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results
where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance
and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports,
and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of
their Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required
administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to
ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried
out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 3of10
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged
materials that are designated as Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to
requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not
completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates
coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and
materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough
to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard
printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination
drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe
relationship of various systems and components.
b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed
dampers, valves, and other controls.
e. Indicate required installation sequences.
f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and
minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect
indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension
changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the
Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms
showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection,
fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.
2. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all
disciplines.
3. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs,
including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers,
access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
4. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 4of10
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other
fire-alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and
motor control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column
center lines.
5. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and
sprinkler heads.
6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work
is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are
Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings
are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient,
Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and
resubmit.
7. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or
interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI
in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architectand Owner's Project Manager.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts
the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 5of10
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of
affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's Action: Architectand Owner's Project Manager will review each RFI,
determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's
response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered
as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal
according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract
Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of
receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B.
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 6of10
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI
response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days
if Contractor disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conductOwner's Project Manager will schedule and conduct
meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose
presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and
Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited
attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant
discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to
everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three seven days of
the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days
after execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their
consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers;
and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters
relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises and existing building.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 7of10
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute
meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site
before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with
other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend
the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for
the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the
following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility requirements.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
l. Manufacturer's written instructions.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
s. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Installation procedures.
u. Coordination with other work.
v. Required performance results.
w. Protection of adjacent work.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 8of10
x. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,
including required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other
parties requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to
Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to
Project closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their
consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers;
and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project
closeout, including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents.
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for
final inspection for acceptance.
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
f. Requirements for demonstration and training.
g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial
Completion and for final payment.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Coordination of separate contracts.
k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
E. Progress Meetings: progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future
activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 9of10
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule,
or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will
be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and
distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring
information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each
meeting.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 10of10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 1of1
SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal
schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from
entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and
schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
01 32 33 - 1of3
SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Periodic construction photographs.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic
documentation.
2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic
documentation as project record documents at Project closeout.
3. Section 02 41 16 "Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation before
building demolition operations commence.
4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic
documentation before selective demolition operations commence.
5. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site
clearing operations commence.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For .
B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points
marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of
construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic
documentation.
C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.
2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same
aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by
date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.
3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in
file metadata tag:
a. Date photograph was taken.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
01 32 33 - 2of3
b. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a
professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.
1.5 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200
by 2400 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in
focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will
not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital
camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing
software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs as needed with the cutoff
date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show
status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
E. Architect -Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will
instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
01 32 33 - 3of3
directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to
show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
F. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs as indicated,
to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
1. Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date
associated with each Application for Payment.
G. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic
photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and
are not included in the Contract Sum.
1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.
2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or
losses.
b. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
c. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 01 32 33
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1of10
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment
and the schedule of values.
2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting
schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,
record Specifications, and record Product Data.
5. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings
of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in
individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that
do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not
complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated
in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files
to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard
Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network
firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe
Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display
resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2of10
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order
by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review,
ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include
additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by
Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those
corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values,
and Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule.
Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those
submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required
early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of
Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and
timing for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings
will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the
Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record
drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of
digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available
in DWG format.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA
Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3of10
1)
B. |Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance
of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently
unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved
submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the
Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 10 working days for initial review of each submittal.
Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required.
Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be
delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 working days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 14 working days for
initial review of each submittal.
a. .
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that
submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's
consultants, allow 10 working days for review of each submittal. Submittal will
be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic
submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating
submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form
with links enabling navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4of10
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number
followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after
another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and
approval markings and action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to
Owner, containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
k. Related physical samples submitted directly.
l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic
submittal file metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
e. .
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other
than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.
Include same identification information as related submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial
submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent
of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from
Architect's action stamp.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5of10
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,
suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary
for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only
final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required
by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual
Specification Sections.
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to specifically
established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file
as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file
as an electronic Project record document file.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product
Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6of10
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on
accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do
not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard
printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is
otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include
the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings,
submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30
by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding
electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample
characteristics, and identification information for record.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7of10
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated
with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition
at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of
units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected
from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with
options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in
manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain
two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one
returned Sample set as a project record sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar
characteristics are to be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is
inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at
least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of
variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended
location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the
Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8of10
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01
31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section
01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals:
Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23
"Operation and Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and
experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names
and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and
personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of
Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and,
where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced
by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9of10
on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code
in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for
primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field
tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its
final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not
limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and
calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria
and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and
version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications
by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract
Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and
design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,
and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies
of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 10of10
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria
in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used
in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for
coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract
Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp
before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section
01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include
Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number,
name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal
has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract
Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal
with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
1. .
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it,
or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of
partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect
without action.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1of8
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction
activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities.
Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services
required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and
during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate
that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during
and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the
Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include
contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review
coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and
to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not
Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by
which the Work will be judged.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2of8
1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected
separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products,
assemblies, and subassemblies.
2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor,
and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings
and equipment, and lighting.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP,
or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.
Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require
that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized
individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and
extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or
quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before
proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may
comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the
minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3of8
numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of
requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and
elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two
dimensions.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
B. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having
jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities
having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed
in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the
wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of
qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a
recognized authority.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice
to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in
format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions,
tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and
quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel
trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and
quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager .
2. .
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements
through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of
personnel responsible for submittal review.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4of8
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of
Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed
tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and
Contractor-elected tests and inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on
the "Statement of Special Inspections."
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection
during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to
testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to
bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract
requirements and approved mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log
of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as
nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming
work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and
inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service
representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5of8
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents,
established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of
the Work.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification
levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or
systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or
assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified
to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency
with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is
acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative
of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized
representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6of8
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction
testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and
construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and
laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to
comply with performance requirements.
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and
mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups
for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ
workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
4. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33
00 "Submittal Procedures."
B. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's
technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical
representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences,
examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of
Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of
written reports.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were
Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the
Contract Documents.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7of8
D. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,
and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as
requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of
personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control
by testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
Project site.
E. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required
quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity
of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the
following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access
to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that
are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8of8
for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1of4
SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,
applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including
"requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same
meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including
"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply,
work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of
Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description
of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect
as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced.
Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2of4
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract
Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be
familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,
obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities
indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the
U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the
United States."
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
www.iapmo.org.
3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as
of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and
Technology; www.nist.gov.
4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy
Technologies Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.
12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3of4
14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
Program; www.trb.org.
15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of
Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.
19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to
change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;
www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available
from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock
Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building
Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board;
(See USAB).
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed
to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of
Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation;
www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California
Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program;
www.cal-iaq.org.
5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable
Forestry; http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4of4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 42 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 1of6
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security
and protection facilities.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities
for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for
electricity used by all entities for construction operations.
D. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
E. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities (Project Trailer), utility hookups, staging areas,
and parking areas for construction personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 2of6
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to
assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of
previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts;
minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with
1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting
posts.
B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with
flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method
2.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated mobile Project Trailer with serviceable finishes,
temperature control (including air conditioning), foundations adequate for normal
loading.he field office shall be within the building with the location determined by the
Owner. The General Contractor shall provide portable restroom. The location of the
portable restroom shall be provided by the Owner.
B. Project Trailer: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified
in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. The Project Trailer
shall contain 2 offices with a central conference room. Furnish and equip offices as
follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables,
plan racks, and bookcases. Each office shall have a desk and 2 chairs.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals.
Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer
than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs,
and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Coffee machine and supplies.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 3of6
5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor
temperature of 68 to 72 deg F.
6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk
height.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required
by locations and classes of fire exposures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required
by progress of the Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00
"Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service
can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and
maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for
use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and
facilities.
1. The General Contractor shall provide a portable restroom. Location to be
determined by Owner.
D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from
entering occupied areas.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 4of6
1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be
performed according to coordination drawings.
a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems
servicing occupied areas.
b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped
air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition
construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is
complete.
2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments
on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using
portable dust-containment devices.
3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved,
HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting
installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and
minimize energy consumption.
1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture
levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service.
Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic
conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible
according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion
inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 5of6
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and
utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction
personnel.
D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools
and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,
utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those
indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site
enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering
site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to
authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize
waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security
and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service
has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no
later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 6of6
facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of
Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification
signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified
in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 50 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1of1
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products
for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the
terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including
make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's
published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another
project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1of9
SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing
execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Installation of the Work.
3. Cutting and patching.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from
indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected
portions of the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or
performance of other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original
conditions after installation of other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For .
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2of9
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to
the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and
patching.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in
building appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will
perform patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that
cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems
that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems
during interruption of permanent services and systems.
D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to
accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's
written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction
practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with
requirements in Section 01 81 13.13 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED
for New Construction and Major Renovations," Section 01 81 13.16 "Sustainable
Design Requirements - LEED for Commercial Interiors," Section 01 81 13.19
"Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Core and Shell Development,"
and Section 01 81 13.23 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for
Schools."
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3of9
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and
functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other
construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of
connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping;
underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by
public utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component
of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and
systems are to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility
with existing finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work
are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by
field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of
the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field
conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4of9
Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and
Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown
on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If
discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to
obtain required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work
progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with
control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required
lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and
tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct
alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90
inches in unoccupied spaces.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5of9
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing
products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible
results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging
operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of
occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of
construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise
levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified
to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to
comply with indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of
attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount
components at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and
patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete
without delay.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6of9
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project
that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or
interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and
patching according to requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing
services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such
services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding,
and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage
elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures
with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or
partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe
or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are
complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 7of9
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize
evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.
Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply
primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the
patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing
the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity
of building enclosure.
I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste
materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or
three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other
contractors are working concurrently.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 8of9
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness
necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to
written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only
cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary
to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements
in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Section 01 74 19
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with
requirements in Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 9of9
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01
40 00 "Quality Requirements."
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 01 73 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 1of10
SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from
partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations.
Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from
demolition or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse
in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 2of10
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight
of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste
management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable
means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators.
Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials., including the following:
1. Demolition Waste:
a. Concrete.
b. Concrete reinforcing steel.
c. Brick.
d. Concrete masonry units.
e. Wood studs.
f. Wood trim.
g. Structural and miscellaneous steel.
h. Rough hardware.
i. Roofing.
j. Equipment.
k. Plumbing fixtures.
l. Piping.
m. Supports and hangers.
n. Valves.
o. Sprinklers.
p. Mechanical equipment.
q. Electrical conduit.
r. Copper wiring.
s. Lighting fixtures.
t. Lamps.
u. Ballasts.
v. Electrical devices.
w. Switchgear and panelboards.
x. Transformers.
2. Construction Waste:
a. Masonry and CMU.
b. Wood trim.
c. Metals.
d. Roofing.
e. Insulation.
f. Piping.
g. Electrical conduit.
h. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General"
Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following
uncontaminated packaging materials:
1) Paper.
2) Cardboard.
3) Boxes.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 3of10
4) Plastic sheet and film.
5) Polystyrene packaging.
6) Wood crates.
7) Plastic pails.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for
commencement of the Work.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,
submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste. Include the following
information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of
total waste.
B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit
calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of
total waste generated by the Work.
C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated
to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of
recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them.
Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste
by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,
weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.
H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician
responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was
recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include
name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 4of10
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of
successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements, that
employs a LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by the USGBC, as waste
management coordinator.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved
certification program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review
methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste
management coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling
and disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and
requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste
reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and
construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of
measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition
construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste
Form CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged,
recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction
waste Form CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total
quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and
transportation procedures.
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in
this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before
incorporation into the Work.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 5of10
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to
individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and
telephone numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of
recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of.
Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator
facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for
separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and
designated location where materials separation will be performed.
D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing
waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste Form CWM-6 for
demolition waste. Include the following:
1. Total quantity of waste.
2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and
cost of collection containers for each type of waste.
3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).
4. Revenue from salvaged materials.
5. Revenue from recycled materials.
6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each
type of waste.
9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,
storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste
management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 50
00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be
responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management
work plan.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 6of10
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within threedays of
submittal return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and
disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent
occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating
materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for
controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
E. Waste Management in Historic Zones or Areas: Hauling equipment and other
materials shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and
openings, by or more.
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label
indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for : Not permitted on Project site.
C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as
follows:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label
indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs.
Protect equipment from exposure to weather.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 7of10
E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
F. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
G. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters,
panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only;
available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. .
C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and
Contractor.
D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to
recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives,
solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process.
E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable
materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line
of remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling
receiver or processor.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 8of10
3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other
metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.
2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00
"Earth Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.
B. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with
other metals.
1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 3/4-inch size.
a. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Section 31 20
00 "Earth Moving" for use as general fill.
b. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Section 32 93
00 "Plants" for use as mineral mulch.
2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
C. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length.
Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood
materials.
D. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
E. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts.
Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.
F. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals
from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.
G. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate
supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
H. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and
store in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 9of10
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets
from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into
component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
a. Comply with requirements in Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for use of clean
sawdust as organic mulch.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,
remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or
incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be
disposed of accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's
property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for
burning materials until fires are extinguished.
D. Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's
property.
E. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.7 ATTACHMENTS
A. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.
B. Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.
C. Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.
D. Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.
E. Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan.
F. Form CWM-6 cost/revenue analysis of demolition waste reduction work plan.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 10of10
G. Form CWM-7 for construction waste
H. Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.
END OF SECTION 01 74 19
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1of5
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Final cleaning.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion
construction photographic documentation.
2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,
record Specifications, and record Product Data.
5. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing
Owner's personnel.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items
specified in other Sections.
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be
completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on
the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2of5
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10
days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.
List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having
jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including
project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion
construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific
warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10
days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.
List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
2. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video
recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."
3. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
4. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
5. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial
Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready
for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the
Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of
items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
completion.
1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for
determining final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment
Procedures."
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3of5
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's
Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected
(punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall
state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance
coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a
final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction
that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer
or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are
potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4of5
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations
maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated
portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and
other foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from Project site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains
remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,
vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to
scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5of5
l. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency.
m. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01
50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for
determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,
and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be
repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair
or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to
required labels and identification.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 1of9
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation
and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and
compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in
individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals.
Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance
submittals are acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to
revisions and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 2of9
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically
indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with
applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation
and maintenance directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return
two copies.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before
commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general
scope and content of manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing
demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's
comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready
access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the
following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to
operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by
system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance
manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 3of9
designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a
designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and
Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of
equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in
the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that
designed the systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in
each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble
instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single
binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.
Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for
minimum readable file size.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 4of9
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents
based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem,
and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group
documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked
files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the
system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree.
Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled
volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in
thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and
with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system,
organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related
components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide
essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or
system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject
matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of
spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the
manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and
major components of equipment included in the section on each divider,
cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with
text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text
pages and use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in
labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate
locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,
descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 5of9
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,
include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,
and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error
messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating
personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain
warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems
and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on
Contract Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 6of9
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required
for identification.
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and
finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures,
repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name
and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,
address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and
drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the
following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 7of9
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.
For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title
in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance
documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of
equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail
essential maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list
of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly,
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 8of9
monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance
documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name
and telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating
procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for
types of emergencies indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data
indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into
the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and
maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and
piece of equipment not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare
information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,
include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to
identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more
than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from
the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to
information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 9of9
available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment or systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate
the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control
sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained
in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and
maintenance manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78
39 "Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting
operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01 78 23
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 1of5
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record
documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 12 00 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating project record
documents covering the Work of multiple contracts.
2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for final property survey.
3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
4. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project
record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed
conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are
issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where
installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who
obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 2of5
similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up
record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would
be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately.
Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of
marked-up record prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same
location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of
Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When
authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as
follows:
1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as
the original Contract Drawings.
2. Format: DWG, Version , Microsoft Windows operating system.
3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record
prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 3of5
5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
6. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract
Drawings for use in recording information.
a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to
use of Architect's digital data files.
b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in
separate layers.
C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor
Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of
accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required
to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction.
Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with
procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include
identification on cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate
electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name
each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data
file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract
modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations
that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 4of5
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information
necessary to provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been
submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record
Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations
that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number
and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for
miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of
the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued
use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification
Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous
record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for
project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record
documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 5of5
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and
Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction.
Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record
documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from
deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's
reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
01 79 00 - 1of6
SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
B. Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the
Demonstration and Training Allowance as specified in Section 01 21 00 "Allowances."
C. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual
time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment
will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning
up. See requirements in Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices."
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and
training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times,
length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include
learning objective and outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration
and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of
video recording of live instructional module.
B. Qualification Data: For facilitator.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
01 79 00 - 2of6
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating
maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that
indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a
record of successful learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation
and maintenance procedures and training.
C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced
photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.
D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review
methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational
materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to
avoid delays.
3. Review required content of instruction.
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather
conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required
to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's
personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and
maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training
modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by
individual Specification Sections.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
01 79 00 - 3of6
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to
master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the
system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the
following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design
responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error
messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
01 79 00 - 4of6
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and
training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in
coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
01 79 00 - 5of6
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training
modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner
for number of participants, instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that
requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven
days' advance notice.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed
and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training
using final operation and maintenance data submittals.
E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each
participant's mastery of module by use of an oral a written a demonstration
performance-based test.
F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner.
Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition
existing before initial training use.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and
training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include
classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but
not student practice.
1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning
objective and lesson outline.
B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type
acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.
1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with
commercial-grade graphic label.
2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project
manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING
01 79 00 - 6of6
3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally
described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file
for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes
the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to
Project table of contents:
a. Name of Contractor/Installer.
b. Business address.
c. Business phone number.
d. Point of contact.
e. E-mail address.
C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise
necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous
running time.
1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.
a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per
segment.
b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of
Project Manual table of contents.
c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15
minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session
again upon commencement of new filming segment.
D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify
equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.
E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone
while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.
F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time
captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.
G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of
training modules in same format as recordings of live training.
END OF SECTION 01 79 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 16 - 1of3
SECTION 02 41 16 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets
needed for reattachment elsewhere.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each
activity.
2. Temporary interruption of utility services.
3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 16 - 2of3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition
operations.
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner.
Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in
Project Record Documents.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities
serving buildings and structures to be demolished.
1. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent
occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and
structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other
buildings and structures.
2. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and
other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing
buildings.
B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during
demolition operations.
1. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable
to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if
shutdown of service is required during changeover.
C. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where
open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and
protections in place.
3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and
debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,
walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 16 - 3of3
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or
used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt.
Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water
when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
END OF SECTION 02 41 16
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1of4
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of
interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the
property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates
exposed by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
6. .
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the
measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental
protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and
construction of barriers.
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be
interrupted.
2. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2of4
3. Use of elevator and stairs.
4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building
and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner
prior to start of demolition.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after
completion of selective demolition.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill
facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved
certification program.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. .
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to
be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file
for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous
materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous
materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3of4
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect
them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition
operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void
existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include
the following:
1. .
B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation
verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect.
Submit documentation at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective
demolition operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does
not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine
extent of selective demolition required.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by
new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before
disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4of4
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch
and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not
to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with
requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and
Disposal."
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1of5
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply
with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop
primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS
D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2of5
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and
class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy .
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3of5
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint
20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D
1187M.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that
of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips
flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4of5
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and
24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed
to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary
to receive adjacent construction.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with where indicated.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend
into surrounding surface.
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A
153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and
iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with
paint adhesion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and
measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5of5
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that
of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide
threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through
bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1of9
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood furring.
3. Wood sleepers.
4. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 63 "Exterior Rough Carpentry" for elevated decks and other
exterior construction made of wood.
2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing."
3. Section 31 31 16 "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to
wood framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches
nominal in least dimension.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of
preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each
type of treatment.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2of9
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Power-driven fasteners.
3. Powder-actuated fasteners.
4. Expansion anchors.
5. Metal framing anchors.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,
securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests
certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001,
"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
1. Dimension lumber framing.
B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no
grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of
any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber
graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade
lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are
minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill
plates.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3of9
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not
use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Load-Bearing Partitions: Any species of machine stress-rated dimension lumber with
a grade of not less than 2400f-2.0E.
1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions.
B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Select Structural grade.
1. Species:
C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Any species of machine
stress-rated dimension lumber with a grade of not less than 2400f-2.0E .
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Furring.
2. Grounds.
B. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no
knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact,
pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide
fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4of9
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a
qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.
C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published
by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated . Manufacturer's published
values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide
nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
1. Thickness: 0.050 inch.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or
spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5of9
B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing
3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing
chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood
Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels.
C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
D. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation
walls.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening
edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as
indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as
sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill
space below partitions.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation
or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that
interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum
number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of
preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 6of9
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table
R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for
One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
K. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size
furring horizontally at 24 inches o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically
at 16 inches o.c.
3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch
nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be
used for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing
members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to
supporting construction unless otherwise indicated.
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16
inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs
spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96
inches high, using members of 2-inch nominalthickness and of same width as
wall or partitions.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may
be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of
thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.
1. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and
less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of
depth indicated or, if not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table
R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 7of9
Two-Family Dwellings.
D. Provide diagonal bracing in [exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner]
[walls, at locations indicated], at 45-degree angle, full-story height unless otherwise
indicated. Use [1-by-4-inch nominal- size boards, let-in flush with faces of studs]
[metal wall bracing, let into studs in saw kerf].
3.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member
with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 incheson masonry.
Attach floor joists as follows:
1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors.
2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as
indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.
B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches and do not embed
more than 4 inches.
C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double
headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches.
D. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist,
one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer
than 2 inches from top or bottom.
E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists
unless nailed to header or band.
F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than
4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch
nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports.
G. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch metal strap anchors
spaced not more than 96 inches o.c., extending over and fastening to three joists.
Embed anchors at least 4 inches into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles
and extending 4 inches beyond bend.
H. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings.
I. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking
equal to depth of studs above.
1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile
and similar heavy finishes or fixtures.
J. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists.
1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- size
lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 8of9
2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double
rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support
with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and
nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.
1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of
same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters
for full bearing against valley rafters.
2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness
as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing
against hip rafter.
B. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch
nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches
o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof
slope and nail to rafters.
C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar
conditions if any.
3.6 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent
preservative for 15 minutes.
3.7 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not
indicated, to comply with the following requirements:
1. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- size, minimum.
2. Material: .
3. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at
least 3-1/2 inches of effective depth.
4. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch clear width of stair.
B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads
and risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and
risers within each flight.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 9of9
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,
despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered
borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered
label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to
comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 - 1of6
SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
3. Wood blocking and nailers.
4. Utility shelving.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing."
2. Section 06 20 13 "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items
exposed to view and not specified in another Section.
3. Section 31 31 16 "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to
wood framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches
nominal in least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of
preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 - 2of6
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each
type of treatment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Power-driven fasteners.
3. Powder-actuated fasteners.
4. Metal framing anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking
for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the
classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,
securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no
grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of
any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber
graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade
lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, .
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are
minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 - 3of6
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for
interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior
construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in
contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill
plates.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or
otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not
use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, .
D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade
exterior masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl
spaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Framing for raised platforms.
2. Concealed blocking.
3. Roof framing and blocking.
4. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar
members in connection with roofing.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 - 4of6
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade
lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate
defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut
lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other
work.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc
coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A
653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 - 5of6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood
Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening
edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as
indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more
than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials
accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor
level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire
blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood
blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as
sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill
space below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not
more than 20 feet o.c.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation
or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that
interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum
number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of
preservative-treated lumber.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 53 - 6of6
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
J. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table
R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for
One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
K. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes
indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,
despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered
borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered
label.
B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection,
miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 10 53
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 63 - 1of5
SECTION 06 10 63 - EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood fences.
2. Wood .
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominal or
greater in width.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches
nominal in least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing
treated material.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 63 - 2of5
1. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and
net amount of preservative retained.
B. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated wood products, from ICC-ES.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for
chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified
by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply
with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of
Review.
1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, .
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are
minimum dressed sizes for dry wood products.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content:
1. Boards: 15 percent.
2. Dimension Lumber: 15 percent.
3. Timber. 19 percent.
2.2 POSTS
A. Dimension Lumber Posts: No. 2 grade and the following species:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 63 - 3of5
2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to
AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the
ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use
Category UC4a.
1. Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process.
C. Pressure treat poles with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use
Category UC4a.
1. Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process.
D. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium .
E. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment.
F. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might
interfere with application of indicated finishes.
G. After treatment, redry to 19 percent maximum moisture content.
H. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by
ALSC's Board of Review.
1. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, .
I. Application: Treat .
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than
1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. Use fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or
ASTM F 2329 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Nails: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70.
D. Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 63 - 4of5
2.5 METAL ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. R. H. Tamlyn & Sons LP.
5. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
6. USP Structural Connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prime wood, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends.
Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
B. Stain wood, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and stain ends.
Comply with requirements in Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing."
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that
interfere with function of members or pieces that are too small to use with minimum
number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
G. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening
as indicated, complying with the following:
1. ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR ROUGH
CARPENTRY
06 10 63 - 5of5
2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.
3. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in
ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
H. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that do not
fully penetrate members where opposite side is exposed to view. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 06 10 63
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1of5
SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 25 00 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall
sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,
securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 2of5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Certified Wood: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from
wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1. Plywood.
B. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than
thickness indicated.
D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.
1. Roof and wall sheathing within 48 inches of walls.
2. Roof sheathing.
2.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 11/32 inch.
B. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, gypsum
sheathing; with water-resistant-treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to
core's face, back, and long edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the following:
a. American Gypsum.
b. G-P Gypsum Corporation.
c. LaFarge North America Inc.
d. National Gypsum Company.
e. Temple-Inland Inc.
f. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
3. Edge and End Configuration: Square.
4. Size: 24 by 96 inches for horizontal 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 3of5
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch 1/2 inch.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Sealant for Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus,
neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum
sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application
indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange
joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against
abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 4of5
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table
R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for
One- and Two-Family Dwellings."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting
wood.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match
spacing of structural support elements.
F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing
so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when
rain is forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30,
"Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing
members at edges of wall sheathing panels.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws.
2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials
that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into
facing.
C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge
up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent
boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 5of5
joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter
and within field of board to each steel stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch
from edges and ends of boards.
2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with
screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to
studs immediately after sheathing is installed.
D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and
edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and
within field of board to each stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch
from edges and ends of boards.
2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with
screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to
studs immediately after sheathing is installed.
E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply
sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after
troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.
END OF SECTION 06 16 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 1of6
SECTION 06 20 13 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior wood cellular PVC trim.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry
work not exposed to view and for framing exposed to view.
2. Section 06 44 00 "Ornamental Woodwork" for exterior ornamental wood
columns.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include
construction and application details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors,
profiles, or textures.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Cellular PVC trim.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the
classification marking is representative of the material tested.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 2of6
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to
provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof
sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under
coverings.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be
applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Cellular PVC Trim: Manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace trim that fails due to defects in manufacturing within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, deterioration, delamination, and excessive
swelling from moisture.
1. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
columns that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Columns: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500
miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered,
as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
1. Exterior trim.
B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC
STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 3of6
1. Exterior trim.
C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading
Rules for Northeastern Lumber."
D. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
1. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by
the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review.
a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, .
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, .
2.4 EXTERIOR TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Finish:
1. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at
12 percent or less.
2. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
3. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
4. Factory Priming: Factory coated on faces and edges with exterior primer
compatible with topcoats specified.
B. Moldings for Painted Finish: WMMPA WM 4, P-grade wood moldings. Made from
kiln-dried stock to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
1. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
2. Factory Priming: Factory coated on faces and edges with exterior primer
compatible with topcoats specified.
C. Cellular PVC Trim: Extruded, expanded PVC with a small-cell microstructure,
recommended by manufacturer for exterior use, made from UV- and heat-stabilized,
rigid material.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 4of6
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertainTeed Restoration Millwork.
b. Ex-Cel Manufacturing, Inc.; Plasticlad.
c. Fypon Ltd.; Fypon PVC.
d. Gossen Corporation; WeatherReady Building Materials.
e. Kleer Lumber, LLC; Kleer Trimboard.
f. Kommerling USA, Inc.; Koma.
g. Ply-Trim, Inc.; DuraBoard.
h. Royal Mouldings Limited; Pro Series Exterior Mouldings.
i. Vi-Lux Plastics Inc.; Cellular PVC.
j. Vycom Corp.; Azek.
k. Wolfpac Technologies, Inc.; Versatex.
2. Density: Not less than 31 lb/cu. ft..
3. Heat Deflection Temperature: Not less than 130 deg F, according to ASTM D
648.
4. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: Not more than 4.5 x 10-5 inches/inch x deg F.
5. Water Absorption: Not more than 1 percent, according to ASTM D 570.
6. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less, according to ASTM E 84.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. For face-fastening siding, provide ringed-shank siding nails or hot-dip
galvanized-steel siding nails.
2. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where
face fastening is required.
3. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel hot-dip
galvanized-steel fasteners.
B. Adhesive for Cellular PVC Trim: Product recommended by trim manufacturer.
C. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.
D. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable
requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant
manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except
members with ends exposed in finished work.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 5of6
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inchradius and
edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inchradius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless
factory primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in
Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal
cuts as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining
exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and
1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to
it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior
finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
B. Install cellular PVC trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 13 - 6of6
C. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from
maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long
except where necessary.
1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
D. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce
tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of
casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.
E. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand
unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with
requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies
with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up
factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during
construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06 20 13
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 - 1of5
SECTION 06 20 23 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior trim, including non-fire-rated interior door and sidelight frames.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry
work not exposed to view and for framing exposed to view.
2. Section 06 44 00 "Ornamental Woodwork."
3. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior
finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include
construction and application details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors,
profiles, or textures.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 - 2of5
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to
provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof
sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under
coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must
be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions
meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials
until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and
nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500
miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered,
as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
1. Interior trim.
B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC
STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1. Interior trim.
C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading
Rules for Northeastern Lumber."
2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement
and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress."
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 - 3of5
3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for
Canadian Lumber."
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for
Southern Pine Lumber."
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading
Rules for West Coast Lumber."
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading
Rules."
D. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
2.2 INTERIOR TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):
1. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at
12 percent or less.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Allowed.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
B. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): Made to patterns included in WMMPA
WM 12.
1. Softwood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, P grade.
a. Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or
sugar pine.
b. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of
shipment at 12 percent or less.
2. Finger Jointing: Allowed.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of
type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure
attachment, concealed where possible.
B. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498
that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in
finished work:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 - 4of5
1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and
edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing
humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or
with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal
cuts as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and
sand unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install
adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inchmaximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to
it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior
finish carpentry.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 - 5of5
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from
maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 incheslong,
except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running
trim. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce
tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints
for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across
joints where necessary for alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish)
across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to
prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink
fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with
requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies
with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore
damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during
construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06 20 23
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 1of6
SECTION 06 46 00 - WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Interior standing and running trim.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, and shims
required for installing wood trim and concealed within other construction before
wood trim installation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements.
B. Samples for Initial Selection:
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12
inches long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and
color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality
Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 2of6
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking
for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the
classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been
completed in installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements
specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior wood
trim only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be
performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood
trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
C. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood
trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between
25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD TRIM FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. .
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 3of6
2.2 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural
Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.
1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality
standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.
Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality
standard.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Economy.
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Economy.
2.5 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3
inches wide.
2. Wood Moisture Content for Exterior Materials: 9 to 15 percent.
3. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with
requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality
grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard
finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and
complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3,
3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Nails for Exterior Use: Aluminum.
B. Screws for Exterior Use: Aluminum.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 4of6
C. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by
metal-framing manufacturer.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed
anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face
of exterior walls and at floors.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces
before fabrication.
B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to
radius indicated for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly.
E. Assemble moldings in shop to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in shop and
prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Exterior Wood Trim for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer
specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
B. Interior Wood Trim for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer
specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
2.9 SHOP FINISHING
A. Opaque Finish for Exterior Trim: Comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 5of6
B. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion
and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble wood trim and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was
not completed in the shop.
C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing
nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork.
1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using
full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent
possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long except where shorter
single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and
related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler; sand
smooth; and finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than
1/8 inch in 96 inches.
3. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall
framing.
a. Space rail brackets not more than o.c.
G. Refer to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" for final finishing of installed wood trim.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and
visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 6of6
END OF SECTION 06 46 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1of5
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood or
steel framing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each product.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2of5
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials
to Project site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation
in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E
84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665,
Type II (non-reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25
or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
D. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective
faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane
is a vapor barrier).
E. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced),
Class B (faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or
foil-scrim polyethylene.
F. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic
binders and no formaldehyde.
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit
less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3of5
2.2 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle;
capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with
self-locking washer in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inchin
diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to
projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in
position indicated with self-locking washer in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel
sheet with each leg 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inchin
diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders,
including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere
with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4of5
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to
substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement
and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not
rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and
as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset,
stapling flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange
of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish
material is installed over it.
5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder
facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of
construction.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces
where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install
blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation
48 inches up either side of partitions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected
by permanent construction immediately after installation.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 5of5
3.6 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation Type : Unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation.
B. Insulation Type : Faced, glass-fiber blanket insulation.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1of3
SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building paper.
2. Building wrap.
3. Flexible flashing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
2. Section 07 27 13 "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers" for sheet air barrier
applied over wall sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on
testing according to referenced standards.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt),
unperforated.
B. Building Paper: Water-vapor-permeable, asphalt-saturated kraft building paper that
complies with ICC-ES AC38, Grade D; except with water-resistance rating not less
than 1 hour.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 2of3
C. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according
to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand
Housewrap.
b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek
CommercialWrap.
c. Ludlow Coated Products; Air Stop Housewrap.
d. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard Classic Wrap.
e. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Pro Weather Protective Barrier.
f. Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 75 perms per ASTM E 96/E 96M,
Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
3. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg when tested
according to ASTM E 2178.
4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
D. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene
film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not
less than 0.025 inch.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor
Butyl Self Adhered Flashing.
c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL.
d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield.
e. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap.
f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 25.
i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor
Plus Self-Adhered Flashing.
j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.
k. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard JT-20 Tape.
l. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto-Seal.
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible
flashing for substrate.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 3of3
C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely
fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inchoverlap unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten
to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
D. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at
flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to
ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 07 25 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 1of4
SECTION 07 31 13 - ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Asphalt shingles.
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in
this Section.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify
color selected:
1. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles felt underlayment and
self-adhering sheet underlayment from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related
roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test
method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 2of4
and roof slopes indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to
asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end
on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.
1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or
permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.
B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight
or when roofing work is not in progress.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity
conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and
substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip
galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed shank,
sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to
penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or
plywood sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal
as flashing.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 3of4
2.4 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."
1. Sheet Metal: Stainless steel .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing
and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and
completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and
penetrations through asphalt shingles.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements
apply.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with
low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable.
Install at locations indicated below on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water.
Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24
inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven
days.
1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet
underlayment.
C. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch- wide felt
underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches.
Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with
asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt underlayment nails.
1. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at
least 6 inches.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 4of4
3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions,
recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt
shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with
tabs removed with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.
1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes.
2. Install starter strip along rake edge.
C. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform
exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating
alternating pattern in succeeding courses.
D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four roofing nails located according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Where roof slope exceeds 20:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing
cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails.
2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing
cement spots.
3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt
shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.
E. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle
exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing
winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
END OF SECTION 07 31 13
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33 - 1of4
SECTION 07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and
blocking.
2. Section 06 20 13 "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for exterior cellular PVC trim.
3. Section 07 25 00 "Weather Barriers" for weather-resistive barriers.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure
proper sequencing.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
1. For vinyl siding, include VSI's official certification logo printed on Product Data.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For vinyl siding including related accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.
1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding.
2. 24-inch- wide-by-36-inch- high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood
backing.
3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit.
4. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33 - 2of4
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vinyl Siding Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs a VSI-certified
Installer on Project.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time
of use.
B. Store materials under cover.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including cracking, fading, and deforming.
b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.
c. .
2. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured
according to ASTM D 2244.
3. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source
from single manufacturer.
2.2 VINYL SIDING
A. Vinyl Siding: Integrally colored product complying with ASTM D 3679.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Alside.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Exterior Portfolio by Crane.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33 - 3of4
d. Gentek Building Products, Inc.
e. Heartland Building Products; a ProVia company.
f. Kaycan Ltd.
g. Mastic Home Exteriors.
h. Mitten Inc.
i. Norandex; Building Materials Distribution, Inc.
j. RMC Siding.
k. Royal Building Products.
l. Variform, Inc.
B. Horizontal Pattern: 6-1/2- or 7-inch exposure in beaded-edge, single-board style.
C. Texture: Smooth Wood grain to match existing siding.
D. Nominal Thickness: 0.044 inch to match existing siding.
E. Minimum Profile Depth (Butt Thickness): to match existing siding.
F. Nailing Hem: Double thickness.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner
caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building
configuration.
1. Provide accessories made from same material as matching color and texture of
adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated.
B. Vinyl Accessories: Integrally colored vinyl accessories complying with ASTM D 3679
except for wind-load resistance.
1. Texture: to match existing siding.
C. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following vinyl decorative accessories as
indicated:
1. Door and window casings with fluted faces.
2. Moldings and trim.
D. Colors for Decorative Accessories: Match adjacent siding.
E. Flashing: Provide aluminum stainless-steel flashing complying with Section 07 62 00
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.
1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Factory-prime coating.
F. Fasteners:
1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient
length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 33 - 4of4
2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to
penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate.
3. For fastening vinyl, use aluminum stainless-steel fasteners. Where fasteners are
exposed to view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item
being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal
movement.
B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a
weathertight installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace
with new materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in
a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07 46 33
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 1of4
SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders,
and stairs for access to roof hatches.
2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed
metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and
miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.
3. Section 07 71 00 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel
stops, gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener
disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects
in construction.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared
on Samples of size to adequately show color.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to
be supported.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 2of4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
C. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D
4397.
3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
D. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for
application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish
of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed
fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300
stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or
ASTM F 2329.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300
stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM,
PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as
recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus;
of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain
watertight.
G. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.2 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 3of4
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual
locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without
warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting
indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar
metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet,
or install a course of polyethylene sheet.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by
manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 4of4
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
according to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting."
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Clean off excess sealants.
E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 72 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1of7
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2of7
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been
removed from joint substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable
to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and
joint substrates.
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants
is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C
1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3of7
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR
177.2600.
E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.2 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a
surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute
to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where
applicable.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4of7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
e. .
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
e. .
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant
manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5of7
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for
use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in
subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to
eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following
requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant
system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying
with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and
covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4
inch inside masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to
wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure
uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6of7
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in
vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut
silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately
after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
I. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated,
seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations
with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of
partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of
sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each
floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail
Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere
to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to
test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to
determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion
hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations,
whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill,
sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7of7
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces
are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure
from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered
satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to
comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove
sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 1of8
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" Section 08 71 11 "Door Hardware
(Descriptive Specification)" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 2of8
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those
on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inchspace between each
stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
2. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Custom Metal Products.
5. Megamet Industries, Inc.
6. Republic Doors and Frames.
7. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 3of8
2.2 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. Basement Door #01.
1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with
minimum A40 coating.
d. Edge Construction:Model 1, Full Flush.
e. Core: Polyurethane.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch,
with minimum A40 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Factory.
C. Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 860. .
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with
minimum G60A60 coating.
d. Edge Construction:Continuously welded with no visible seam.
e. Core: Steel stiffened.
1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x
sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch,
with minimum G60A60 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 4of8
2.3 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum
3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer
from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each
anchor location.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A
1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mildry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal
thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure
proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel
vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with
vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no
more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or
mineral-fiber insulation.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 5of8
2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures of same
material as face sheets.
4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for
attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material
as face sheets.
5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water
penetration.
6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where
required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend
minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as
required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and
to jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door
silencers.
5. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45
-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover
opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground
smooth and flush with frame.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and
surface-mounted door hardware.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 6of8
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES
A. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on
finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3.
1. Color and Gloss: .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by
grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated.
Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards
specified.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 7of8
a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with
grout containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with
mineral-fiber insulation.
4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inchplus or minus 1/32
inch.
c. At Bottom of Door: plus or minus 1/32 inch.
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inchplus or minus 1/32
inch.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
08 11 13 - 8of8
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove
and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for
factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are
specified in painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 1of6
SECTION 08 12 13 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for hollow-metal door and
frame assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
3. Details of each different wall opening condition.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 2of6
4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
5. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
6. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those
on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inchspace between each
unit to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Megamet Industries, Inc.
4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL FRAMES
A. Construct exterior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances,
and as specified.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 860. Basement Door #01.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with
minimum G60A60 coating.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 3of6
3. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.3 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum
3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer
from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each
anchor location.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A
1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft.
density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal
thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure
proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 4of6
1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and
to jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door
silencers.
5. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45
-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover
opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground
smooth and flush with frame.
C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers
where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow-metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 5of6
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for
substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by
grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated.
Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards
specified.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 6of6
d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work
that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are
specified in painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 08 12 13
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MAINTENANCE OF PAINTING
AND COATING
09 01 90 - 1of4
SECTION 09 01 90 - MAINTENANCE OF PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Design Reference Sample: A Sample that represents Architect's prebid selection of
work to be matched; it may be existing work or specially produced for Project.
B. Glazing: Applying translucent paint material (glaze) to protect paint beneath it and
impart a more uniform surface gloss.
C. Historic Paint Materials: Paint materials manufactured to match historic paint
formulations; either custom-formulated products or standard products of manufacturers
of historic paint materials.
D. Modern Paint Materials: Paint materials not designed to match historic paint
formulations but that may be required to match historic paint colors.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste daily.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with historic treatment of painting only when existing
and forecasted weather conditions are within the environmental limits set by each
manufacturer's written instructions and specified requirements.
B. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MAINTENANCE OF PAINTING
AND COATING
09 01 90 - 2of4
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
D. Concealed and undocumented historic items, murals, and similar objects encountered
during historic treatment remain Owner's property. Carefully protect each item or
object.
1. Coordinate with Owner's [archaeologist] [historical adviser] <Insert
requirement>, who will establish special procedures for protection.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform historic treatment of painting in the following general sequence:
1. Dismantle existing surface-mounted objects and hardware except items indicated
to remain in place. Tag items with location identification and protect.
2. Verify that temporary protections have been installed to suit Project conditions.
3. Examine condition of surfaces to be painted.
4. Remove existing paint to the degree required for each substrate and surface
condition of existing paint.
5. Apply paint system.
6. Reinstall dismantled surface-mounted objects and hardware except as otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES, GENERAL
A. General: Have historic treatment of painting directed[ and performed] by a qualified
historic treatment specialist. Ensure that historic treatment specialist's field supervisors
are present when painting begins and during its progress. In treating historic items,
disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows:
1. Apply each product according to manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Stop the progress of deterioration and corrosion by removing failed coatings and
corrosion and repainting.
3. Verify that substrate surface conditions are suitable for painting.
4. Allow other trades to repair items in place and retain as much original material as
possible before repainting.
5. Reproduce original, historic paint systems where indicated or scheduled.
6. Make historic treatment of materials reversible whenever possible unless
otherwise indicated.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MAINTENANCE OF PAINTING
AND COATING
09 01 90 - 3of4
7. Install temporary protective measures to protect historic painted surfaces that are
indicated to be treated later.
B. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use only the
gentlest mechanical methods, such as scraping and lightly hand sanding, that will not
abrade softer substrates, reducing clarity of detail. Do not use abrasive methods such as
rotary sanding, rotary wire brushing, or power tools except as indicated as part of the
historic treatment program and as approved by Architect.
C. Heat Processes: Do not use torches, heat guns, or heat plates.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with historic treatment specialist present, for
compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of the painting work. Comply with paint manufacturer's written
instructions for inspection.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: Do not begin application of coatings unless
moisture content of exposed surface is below the maximum value recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer and not greater than the following maximum values
when measured with an electronic moisture meter appropriate to the substrate material:
1. : <Insert number> percent.
C. Alkalinity: Do not begin application of coatings unless surface alkalinity is within
range recommended by paint manufacturer. Conduct alkali testing with litmus paper on
exposed plaster, cementitious, and masonry surfaces.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
1. If existing surfaces cannot be prepared to an acceptable condition for proper
finishing by using specified surface-preparation methods, notify Architect in
writing.
E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates
and conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Protect persons, motor vehicles, building site, plants, surrounding surfaces of
building being worked on, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from historic
treatment of painting.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
MAINTENANCE OF PAINTING
AND COATING
09 01 90 - 4of4
1. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and
vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of historic
treatment Work.
B. Comply with chemical-product manufacturer's written instructions for protecting
building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent
chemical solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping,
buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.
1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical
solutions being used unless the solutions will not damage adjacent surfaces.
Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not
apply liquid strippable masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no
longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.
2. Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of sufficient force to spread them
to unprotected surfaces.
3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.
4. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents
soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and
water penetration into building interiors.
3.4 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for application methods and with other
Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting," and Section
09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing."
B. Prepare surfaces to be painted according to the Surface-Preparation Schedule and with
manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition.
C. Apply a transition coat over incompatible existing coatings.
D. Blending Monochromatic Painted Surfaces: When painting new substrates patched into
existing surfaces or touching up missing or damaged finishes, apply coating system
specified for the specific substrate. Apply final finish coat over entire surface from
edge to edge and corner to corner.
END OF SECTION 09 01 90
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1of7
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Texture finishes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated
and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100
sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each texture finish indicated.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2of7
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of
damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are
mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. PABCO Gypsum.
7. Temple-Inland.
8. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3of7
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or
paper-faced galvanized steel sheet Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or
rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4of7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints
of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.
ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and
trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5of7
H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension
lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or
provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing)
horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with
no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base
layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers
at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing
member, 16 inchesminimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or
furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member
with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face
layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to
framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge
joints of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6of7
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically
indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting."
E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other
surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and
smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to
produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or
other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive
texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other
means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces,
immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to
texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 7of7
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors
and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1of7
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior
substrates.
1. Wood.
2. Gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application
of paint systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2of7
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. Behr Process Corporation.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co.
3. California Paints.
4. Duron, Inc.
5. Pratt & Lambert.
6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other
Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that
are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3of7
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following
VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match existing
colors.
1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.
1. .
B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use
in paint systems indicated.
1. .
2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52.
1. .
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4of7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic
moisture meter as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable
and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved
to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5of7
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations
in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple
coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,
but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate
coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut
in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and
Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
i. .
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6of7
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Architect.
i. .
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing
and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Wood Substrates: Including [wood trim] [architectural woodwork] [doors] [windows]
[wood-based panel products] [glued-laminated construction] [exposed joists] [exposed
beams] <Insert description>.
1. Latex System:
State Street (167-1/705-3) May 9, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7of7
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
B. Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
C. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
END OF SECTION 09 91 23
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 1 of 7
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1, as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or
indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Provide new duplex sump pump and all associated controls.
2. The disconnecting and removal of existing pump and controls. All equipment to
be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places
designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the
Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
3. Guarantee and instructions.
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Massachusetts Fuel Gas and
Plumbing Code, NFPA 54 and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto.
Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or
regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of
applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the
Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of
his work.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 2 of 7
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from
the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute
arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it
is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent
of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and
binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to
his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such
failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications
before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be
called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 3 of 7
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in
the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in
accordance with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S.
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the
same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials
and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard
requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall
remain with the Plumbing Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with
the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the
work.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 4 of 7
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Section 01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as
may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials
and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be
coordinated with the Northampton Housing Authority.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work
and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be
made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 5 of 7
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the Plumbing Contractor.
1.13 PROTECTION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without
expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage
rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are
indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from
freezing.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified
personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's
representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver two (2) copies
of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name
of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of
Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard
binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 6 of 7
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as
the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
this period.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete equipment, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by
this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor
shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to
such places as designated by the Owner.
2.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Make final waste connections to all equipment, as required.
2.3 SUMP PUMP AND CONTROL
A. See drawings for Make & Model of sump pump and controls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the
Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be
tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 7 of 7
approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the
Plumbing Code.
3.2 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job,
thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers,
rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in
perfect condition and ready for use.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid.
END OF SECTION
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 1 of 11
GENERAL PART 1 -
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this
Section of the Specifications.
B. This Contractor must be familiar with all other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications
which affect the work of this Section.
C. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 Sections, as
part of this Section.
D. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
E. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on
the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Branch Circuit Wiring and Raceway.
2. High Level Alarm Dialer.
3. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including
final connections to equipment.
4. Inspections.
5. Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in the latest
editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:
1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
2. MEC - Massachusetts Electric Code.
3. NFPA 70 – National Fire Protection Association.
4. ANSI/ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 2 of 11
1.4 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts
State Building Code CMR 780, Eighth Edition, including the 2014 Massachusetts Electrical
Code, the Massachusetts Board of Fire Prevention Regulations Code – CMR 527, and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between
the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally
determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as
to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The
Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required
to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical
Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at
the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be
performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items.
G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 3 of 11
his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged
at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since
the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard
thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering
any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product
specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the
General Requirements.
1.7 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels
shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all
details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from
any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 4 of 11
substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.9 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance
of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. Refer to Division 1, Section 01500, Temporary Facilities.
1.11 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. Refer to Division 1, Section 01500, Temporary Facilities.
1.12 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably
implied in both.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.13 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
work and that of other trades.
1.14 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract
shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light
his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 5 of 11
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by
the individual Contractor.
1.15 WORK CONCEALED
A. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the
building.
1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Refer to Division 1, Section 01770, Contract Closeout.
B. The manual shall also include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
3. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each
item of equipment.
4. Panel schedules.
5. List of recommended spare parts.
6. Factory and field test reports.
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a
period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or
replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his
work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or
repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and
patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not
allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked
by the Electrical Contractor, any error due to failure to coordinate work with other divisions
shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to coordinate, who shall make the
corrections at his own expense. Refer to specification Section 01045 for additional
requirements.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
D. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 6 of 11
E. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor
shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1, Section 01770, Closeout Procedures.
PRODUCTS PART 2 -
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed
in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exterior exposed above grade, in spaces
subject to moisture, and for conduit sweeps below grade or under concrete slab on grade. Conduit
shall comply with ANSI C80.1 and the latest applicable Federal Specifications. Fittings and
Conduit Bodies shall be steel and comply with NEMA FB 1.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed
inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above.
Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association, ANSI C80.3, and applicable Federal Specifications.
Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of steel construction,
set screw type. Die cast fittings shall not be permitted.
C. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, light fixtures and other
removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. Length of flexible steel conduit
shall not exceed six feet for light fixture connections. For other equipment connections, length
of flexible steel conduit shall not exceed 18 inches.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit shall interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket for
connections to motors or other vibrating equipment in damp or wet locations and outdoor
applications. Length of liquidtight flexible steel conduit shall not exceed 18 inches.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types
indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used.
B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THHN, solid.
C. Conductors #8 AWG and larger, Type THHN, stranded.
D. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
2.3 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted
or required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast
aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 7 of 11
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. Structural conditions.
2. Size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering.
3. Device of fixture for which required.
4. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed.
5. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used.
D. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge.
E. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws,
bonderized paint finished.
F. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the
Massachusetts Electrical Code.
G. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General
Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal.
2.4 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches.
The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit
schedule of nameplate lettering for approval.
1. Letter Size:
a. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
b. ¼ inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to
cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements
and those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might
interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. Refer to specification Section 01310 for
coordination drawing requirements.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders,
mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact
locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 8 of 11
other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall
conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made
accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified.
3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of electrical conduit and equipment shall be
performed by the Electrical Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General
Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed
in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for
chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the Electrical Contractor, and error due to failure to
co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor,
who shall make the corrections as his own expense.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall layout and mark where drilling is required for installation of his
hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by
the General Contractor.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic service
equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor
frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of
electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways
and grounded (neutral) conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded per the Massachusetts
Electrical Code. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or
bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this
Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to
one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and
install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required,
conforming with the Massachusetts Electrical Code.
D. A minimum #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length
of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment
components for continuity. The equipment ground conductor shall be sized for the largest
circuit contained in the conduit or enclosure. Positive ground connections with the ground wire
shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by
means of positively secured ground clamp in each.
E. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations.
F. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 9 of 11
G. Remove paint, mill oils, and any other surface contaminants at connection points.
H. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
3.4 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the
equivalent of three 90o bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical
Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected
against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction
boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger.
Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to
eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper
across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted
lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor,
aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment
precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the
Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below
closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural
Plans for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without
excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of
finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support
the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used shall be provided with covers.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical
Contractor and be included in his bid.
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 10 of 11
3.7 NAMEPLATE AND LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Installation of nameplates and labels identifying devices shall be provided after completion of
painting.
B. Nameplates and labels shall be installed parallel to equipment lines.
C. Nameplates shall be provided for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure
with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive unless otherwise noted. Nameplates
for each control panel and for major control components shall be located outside panel with
corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
D. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations.
Secure nameplate to outside surface of door on surface mounted panelboards located in
electrical rooms and mechanical spaces.
E. Provide embossed adhesive tape labels with 3/16 inch white letters on black background for
identification of individual control device stations. Labels shall be installed with for permanent
adhesion and sealed with clear lacquer.
F. Provide cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire marker for each conductor at panelboard
gutters, pull boxes, junction boxes, and each load connection. The wire markers shall contain
the following information:
G. Provide branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits.
H. Provide control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams.
I. Provide conduit marker for each conduit having a total length exceeding 20 feet. The markers
shall be spaced 20 feet on center. Color of markers shall be as follows:
a. Blue marker for Low Voltage Signal and Data Systems.
b. Yellow marker for 208 Volt Systems.
3.8 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including, but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
B. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
C. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical
rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms,
and receiving rooms.
D. Safing Insulation
256 State Street Renovations April 18, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 11 of 11
E. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-
Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as
indicated on the Drawings.
F. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
G. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing.
H. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes.
I. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
J. Refer to Specification Section 07840 for additional requirements.
END OF SECTION